blob: 9c565671912161d6905060df9fe3ad915f301ad0 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2020 Aug 15
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings. This
70allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +0100220To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001084The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1085*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1086value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1087identifiers:
1088>
1089 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1090 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1091 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1092 \ }
1093<
1094Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1095
1096If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1097language constants and special forms are matched.
1098
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001099Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1100Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1101using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1102
1103Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1104bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1105
1106This option is off by default.
1107>
1108 " Default
1109 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1110<
1111
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001112COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001113
1114COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1115development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1116versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1117add this line to your .vimrc: >
1118 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1119To disable it again, use this: >
1120 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1121
1122
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001123COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001124
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001125The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001126comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1127
1128 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1129
1130The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001133CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1134
1135Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1136
1137Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001138cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001139cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001140
1141
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001142CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001143
1144This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1145used.
1146
1147Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1148symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1149between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001150"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1151>
1152 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001153
1154For using tcsh: >
1155
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001156 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001157
1158Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1159tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001160will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001161"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1162variable.
1163
1164
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001165CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001166
1167Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001168hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001170normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001171line to your .vimrc file: >
1172
1173 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1174
1175Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1176
1177 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1178
1179To disable these again, use this: >
1180
1181 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1182 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1183<
1184
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001185CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001186
1187Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1188doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1189startup vimrc: >
1190 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1191
1192
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001193DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1194
1195Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1196used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1197a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1198from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1199
1200More information about the language and its development environment at the
1201official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1202
1203dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1204type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1205and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1206framework.
1207
1208Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1209
1210https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1211
1212
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001213DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001214
1215Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001216according to freedesktop.org standard:
Bram Moolenaar65e0d772020-06-14 17:29:55 +02001217https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
1218To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set >
1219 let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1
1220Note that this may cause wrong highlight.
1221To highlight KDE-reserved features, set >
1222 let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1
1223g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001224
1225
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001226DIFF *diff.vim*
1227
1228The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1229there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1230
1231 :let diff_translations = 0
1232
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001233Also see |diff-slow|.
1234
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001235
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001236DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001237
1238The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1239provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1240the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1241versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1242uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1243line to your startup file: >
1244 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1245
1246
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001247DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001248DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1249DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001250
1251There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1252are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1253automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1254defaults to XML.
1255You can set the type manually: >
1256 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1257or: >
1258 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1259You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1260Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1261 :set filetype=docbksgml
1262or: >
1263 :set filetype=docbkxml
1264
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001265You can specify the DocBook version: >
1266 :let docbk_ver = 3
1267When not set 4 is used.
1268
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001269
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001270DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001271
1272There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1273extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1274is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1275this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1276Select the version you want with the following line: >
1277
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001278 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001279
1280If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1281Windows 2000.
1282
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001283A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001284"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1285is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001286
1287 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1288
1289If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1290
1291
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001292DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1293
1294Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001295(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1296idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001297
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001298There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1299explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1300Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001301 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1302or >
1303 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1304
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001305It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1306the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1307adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001308 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1309
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001310There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001311are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1312
1313Variable Default Effect ~
1314g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1315g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1316 doxygen comments.
1317
1318doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1319 and html_my_rendering underline.
1320
1321doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1322 colour highlighting.
1323
1324doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001325 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001326
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001327There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001328configuration.
1329
1330Highlight Effect ~
1331doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1332 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1333doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1334 \endlink from a \link section.
1335
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001336
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001337DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001338
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001339The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001340case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1341
1342 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1343
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001344The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001345this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1346
1347 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1348
1349before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1350Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1351'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1352Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1353highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001354delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001355
1356 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1357
1358The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1359
1360
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001361EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001362
1363While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001364syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1365highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001366highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1367
1368 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1369
1370Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1371
1372Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1373
1374 :let eiffel_strict=1
1375 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1376
1377Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1378five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1379"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1380
1381Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1382guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1383lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1384
1385If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1386"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1387
1388 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1389
1390instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1391
1392Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1393experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1394
1395 :let eiffel_ise=1
1396
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001397Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001398
1399 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1400
1401to your startup file.
1402
1403
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001404EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1405
Bram Moolenaar7ff78462020-07-10 22:00:53 +02001406Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001407version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001408Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1409
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001410Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1411for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001412(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1413
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001414The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1415
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001416 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1417 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1418
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001419To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001420auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1421add the following line to your startup file: >
1422
1423 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
1424
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001425 or
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001426
1427 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
1428
1429
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001430ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001431
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001432Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001433the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001434
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001435The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1436put the following line in your vimrc: >
1437
1438 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1439
1440To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1441
1442 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001443
1444
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001445FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1446
1447FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001448NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1449development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001450
1451Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1452syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1453editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1454start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1455'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1456(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1457and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1458
1459If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1460move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1461 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1462
1463
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001464FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001465
1466The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1467modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001468following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001469J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1470
1471If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1472redefine the following syntax groups:
1473
1474 - formConditional
1475 - formNumber
1476 - formStatement
1477 - formHeaderStatement
1478 - formComment
1479 - formPreProc
1480 - formDirective
1481 - formType
1482 - formString
1483
1484Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1485directives per default in the same syntax group.
1486
1487A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001488header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001489this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1490
1491 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1492
1493The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001494gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001495conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1496
1497
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001498FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001499
1500Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001501Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001502should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1503almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001504
1505Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001506Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001507syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1508
1509When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001510form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001511 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001512in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001513form, then >
1514 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1515in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1516
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001517If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1518extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1519file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1520will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1521on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001522
1523When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1524source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001525fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001526neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001527determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1528using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1529compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1530free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1531columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1532are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1533algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1534file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1535incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1536just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001537of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001538
1539Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001540Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001541fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001542Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1543using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001544variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1545 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001546placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001547mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1548
1549Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1550If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1551fortran_fold with a command such as >
1552 :let fortran_fold=1
1553to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1554is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001555subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001556also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1557 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1558then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001559case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001560fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1561 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1562then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001563lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001564
1565If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1566fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001567you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001568units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1569unit.
1570
1571More precise fortran syntax ~
1572If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1573 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001574then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001575statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1576recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1577construct.
1578
1579Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001580The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1581find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1582deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1583items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001584
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001585If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1586other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001587that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001588
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001589The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1590the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1591to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1592fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1593ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001594
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001595If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1596set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1597ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1598an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1599contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001600 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1601 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001602 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001603 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001604 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001605 endif
1606Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1607precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1608
1609Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001610the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1611by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1612f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1613files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1614identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1615Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001616 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001617
1618For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1619now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1620silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001621instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001622
1623The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1624comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1625non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1626or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001627items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001628
1629Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001630Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1631strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001632because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1633
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001634For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1635|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001636
1637
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001638FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001639
1640In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1641the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1642appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1643patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1644number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1645
1646For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1647as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1648
1649 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1650 \ set filetype=fvwm
1651
1652If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1653find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1654"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1655in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1656
1657 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1658
1659to your .vimrc file.
1660
1661
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001662GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001663
1664The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1665the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1666is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1667are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1668
1669 htmlString
1670 htmlValue
1671 htmlEndTag
1672 htmlTag
1673 htmlTagN
1674
1675Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1676java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1677group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1678correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1679to the contains clause.
1680
1681The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1682group to make them easier to see.
1683
1684
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001685GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001686
1687The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001688under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001689of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1690filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1691(see |filetype.txt|).
1692
1693
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001694HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001695
1696The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001697Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001698syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1699
1700If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1701light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1702 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1703To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1704add: >
1705 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1706To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1707 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1708And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1709 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1710If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1711your .vimrc: >
1712 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1713
1714The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1715directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001716directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1717operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001718as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1719 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1720
1721The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1722automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1723TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001724or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001725in your .vimrc >
1726 :let lhs_markup = none
1727for no highlighting at all, or >
1728 :let lhs_markup = tex
1729to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1730For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1731this variable, so e.g. >
1732 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001733will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001734set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1735loading a file.
1736
1737
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001738HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001739
1740The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1741
1742The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1743This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
1744closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
1745defined for you)
1746
1747Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1748names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1749makes it easy to spot errors
1750
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001751Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001752names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1753
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001754Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001755are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1756text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1757while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001758only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001759<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001760
1761If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1762following syntax groups:
1763
1764 - htmlBold
1765 - htmlBoldUnderline
1766 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1767 - htmlUnderline
1768 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1769 - htmlItalic
1770 - htmlTitle for titles
1771 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1772
1773To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1774of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1775following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1776are read during initialization) >
1777 :let html_my_rendering=1
1778
1779If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1780http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1781
1782You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1783vimrc file: >
1784 :let html_no_rendering=1
1785
1786HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1787details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1788However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001789ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001790 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1791
1792JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1793'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001794programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001795supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1796
1797Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1798
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001799There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1800written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001801following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1802(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001803>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001804 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1805 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1806
1807Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1808the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1809
1810
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001811HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001812
1813The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1814
1815Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1816doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1817this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1818different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1819 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1820
1821Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1822
1823Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1824signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1825a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1826 :set syntax=htmlos
1827
1828Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1829block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1830
1831
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001832IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001833
1834Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1835how to recognize this filetype.
1836
1837To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1838 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1839
1840
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001841INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001842
1843Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1844most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1845to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1846 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1847
1848By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1849and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1850you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1851need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1852 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1853
1854This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1855set of highlighted system functions.
1856
1857The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1858it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1859by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1860startup sequence: >
1861 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1862
1863By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1864version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1865Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1866startup sequence: >
1867 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1868
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001869IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1870
1871IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1872Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1873
1874IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1875rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001876repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001877
1878There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1879are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1880
1881The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1882
1883Variable Effect ~
1884
1885idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1886 extensions
1887idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1888idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1889 quite helpful)
1890idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1891
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001892
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001893JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001894
1895The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1896
1897In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1898flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001899classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001900way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1901 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1902
1903All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1904highlight them use: >
1905 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1906
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001907You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001908download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1909If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1910use the following: >
1911 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1912Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1913
1914Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001915how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001916functions:
1917
1918If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1919a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1920 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1921However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1922supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1923 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1924If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1925declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1926definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1927original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1928
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001929In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001930only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001931statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001932your startup file: >
1933 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1934The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001935characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001936new highlightings for the following groups.:
1937 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1938which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001939strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar2547aa92020-07-26 17:00:44 +02001940have opted to choose another background for those statements.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001941
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001942Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1943creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1944similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1945and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001946 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1947 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1948 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1949 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1950 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001951 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001952 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1953To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1954 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1955
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001956If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1957can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1958scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1959actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1960CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001961 :let java_javascript=1
1962 :let java_css=1
1963 :let java_vb=1
1964
1965In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1966for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1967 :hi link javaParen Comment
1968or >
1969 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1970
1971If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1972when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1973to a larger number: >
1974 :let java_minlines = 50
1975This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1976displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1977number is that redrawing can become slow.
1978
1979
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02001980JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
1981
1982The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
1983default. To disable concealment: >
1984 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
1985
1986To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
1987 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
1988
1989
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001990LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001991
1992Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
1993style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
1994define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
1995 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
1996
1997
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001998LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001999
2000Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
2001gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2002 :syn sync minlines=300
2003may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2004difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2005
2006
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002007LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2008
2009To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2010
2011 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2012<
2013
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002014LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2015
2016The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2017
2018 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2019 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2020 Useful for AutoLisp.
2021 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2022 of parenthesization will receive different
2023 highlighting.
2024<
2025The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2026the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2027colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2028specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002029usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002030highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2031
2032
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002033LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002034
2035There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2036
2037If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2038
2039 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2040
2041For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2042set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2043
2044 :let lite_minlines = 200
2045
2046
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002047LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002048
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002049LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002050file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2051users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2052should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2053
2054 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2055
2056If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2057modeline. For a LPC file:
2058
2059 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2060
2061For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2062
2063 // vim:set ft=c:
2064
2065If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2066
2067There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002068used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002069and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002070assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002071you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2072
2073 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2074
2075For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2076
2077 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2078
2079For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2080
2081 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2082
2083For uLPC series of LPC:
2084uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2085instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2086
2087
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002088LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002089
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002090The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002091the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2092lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010020935.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002094
2095 :let lua_version = 5
2096 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002097
2098
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002099MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002100
2101Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002102quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002103signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2104whitespaces and end with a newline.
2105
2106Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002107as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002108only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2109
2110By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002111displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002112with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2113
2114 :let mail_minlines = 30
2115
2116
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002117MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002118
2119In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2120errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2121feature off by using: >
2122
2123 :let make_no_commands = 1
2124
2125
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002126MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002127
2128Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2129supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2130The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2131highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2132
2133 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2134
2135to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2136choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21371, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2138$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2139
2140 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2141 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2142 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2143 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2144 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2145 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2146 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2147 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2148 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2149
2150
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002151MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002152
2153Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2154have the following in your .vimrc: >
2155
2156 let filetype_m = "mma"
2157
2158
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002159MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002160
2161If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2162highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2163comments: >
2164
2165 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2166
2167To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2168
2169 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2170
2171To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2172'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2173
2174 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2175
2176Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2177
2178 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2179
2180To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2181
2182 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2183
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002184Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002185use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2186To enable this option: >
2187
2188 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2189
2190An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2191
2192 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2193
2194
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002195MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002196
2197There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2198
2199If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2200
2201 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2202
2203For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2204set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2205
2206 :let msql_minlines = 200
2207
2208
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002209N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2210
2211N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2212Couchbase Server databases.
2213
2214Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2215and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2216many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2217
2218
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002219NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002220
2221There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2222
2223If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2224errors, use this: >
2225
2226 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2227
2228If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2229
2230
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002231NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002232
2233The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2234activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2235can use them.
2236
2237For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002238processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002239features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >
2240
2241 :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1
2242
2243Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2244Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2245there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002246you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002247can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2248native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2249\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2250accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2251environments.
2252
2253In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2254follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2255
22561. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2257
22582. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2259 exclamation mark, etc.
2260
22613. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2262 carriage return.
2263
2264The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2265algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2266
2267Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2268furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2269vertical space input will be output as is.
2270
2271Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2272than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2273practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002274marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002275need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002276spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2277
2278 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2279
2280Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2281with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2282highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002283"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002284
2285 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2286 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2287 \ gui=reverse,bold
2288
2289If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2290with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2291file: >
2292
2293 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2294
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002295As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002296paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2297
2298Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2299groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2300
2301
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002302OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002303
2304The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2305.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2306
2307 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2308
2309you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2310by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2311
2312 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2313
2314prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2315contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2316
2317
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002318PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002319
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002320The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002321and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002322as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2323sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002324you set the variable: >
2325
2326 :let papp_include_html=1
2327
2328in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2329sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002330edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002331
2332The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2333http://papp.plan9.de.
2334
2335
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002336PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002337
2338Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection
2339doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
2340startup vimrc: >
2341
2342 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2343
2344The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2345provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002346Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002347enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2348following line to your startup file: >
2349
2350 :let pascal_traditional=1
2351
2352To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2353keywords, etc): >
2354
2355 :let pascal_delphi=1
2356
2357
2358The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2359*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2360operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2361
2362 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2363
2364Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2365
2366 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2367
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002368Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002369pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2370match Turbo Pascal. >
2371
2372 :let pascal_gpc=1
2373
2374or >
2375
2376 :let pascal_fpc=1
2377
2378To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2379pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2380
2381 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2382
2383If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2384will be highlighted as Error. >
2385
2386 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2387
2388
2389
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002390PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002391
2392There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2393
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002394Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2395to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2396files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002397
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002398 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002399
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002400To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002401off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002402
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002403To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2404from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002405
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002406 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002407
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002408(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2409enabled it.)
2410
2411If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2412
2413 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2414
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002415(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002416
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002417The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2418highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002419perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2420
2421 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2422 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2423 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2424
2425(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2426
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002427The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002428synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2429If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002430then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002431out the line that causes the mistake.
2432
2433One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2434
2435 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2436 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2437
2438Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2439its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2440
2441 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2442
2443If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2444
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002445 :let perl_fold = 1
2446
2447If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2448
2449 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002450
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002451Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2452this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002453
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002454 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002455
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002456Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2457via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002458
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002459 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2460
2461Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2462behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2463
2464 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002465
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002466PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002467
2468[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2469it has been renamed to "php"]
2470
2471There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2472
2473If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2474
2475 let php_sql_query = 1
2476
2477For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2478
2479 let php_baselib = 1
2480
2481Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2482
2483 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2484
2485Using the old colorstyle: >
2486
2487 let php_oldStyle = 1
2488
2489Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2490
2491 let php_asp_tags = 1
2492
2493Disable short tags: >
2494
2495 let php_noShortTags = 1
2496
2497For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2498
2499 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2500
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002501For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002502one: >
2503
2504 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2505
2506Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2507
2508 let php_folding = 1
2509
2510Selecting syncing method: >
2511
2512 let php_sync_method = x
2513
2514x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2515x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2516x = 0 to sync from start.
2517
2518
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002519PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2520
2521TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2522variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002523see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002524
2525This syntax file has the option >
2526
2527 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2528
2529if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2530
2531
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002532PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002533
2534PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2535
2536This syntax file has the options:
2537
2538- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002539 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002540
2541 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002542 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002543
2544 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2545 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2546 continuation symbols
2547
2548 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2549
2550- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2551 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2552
2553
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002554PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002555
2556There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2557
2558If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2559
2560 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2561
2562For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2563set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2564
2565 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2566
2567
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002568POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002569
2570There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2571
2572First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2573currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2574and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2575Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2576extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2577level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2578highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2579
2580 :let postscr_level=2
2581
2582If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2583the most prevalent version currently.
2584
2585Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2586particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2587PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2588
2589If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2590Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2591follows: >
2592
2593 :let postscr_display=1
2594
2595If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2596Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2597postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2598
2599 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2600
2601PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2602useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2603cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2604character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2605explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2606highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2607
2608 :let postscr_fonts=1
2609 :let postscr_encodings=1
2610
2611There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2612PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2613operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2614if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2615operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2616or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2617highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2618postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2619
2620 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2621<
2622
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002623 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2624PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002625
2626This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2627
2628In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2629the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2630appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2631patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2632"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2633
2634For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2635files, add the following: >
2636
2637 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2638 \ set filetype=ptcap
2639
2640If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2641are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2642internal variable to a larger number: >
2643
2644 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2645
2646(The default is 20 lines.)
2647
2648
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002649PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002650
2651Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2652doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2653startup vimrc: >
2654 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2655The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2656Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2657 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2658 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2659
2660
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002661PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002662
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002663There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002664
2665For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002666 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002667
2668For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002669 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002670
2671For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002672 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2673
2674For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2675 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2676or >
2677 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2678(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002679
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002680For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002681 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002682
2683If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002684preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002685 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2686
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002687Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002688 1 above with anything.
2689
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002690QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002691
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002692The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter)
2693based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit
2694between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax
2695definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users
2696to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can
2697be set for the following effects:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002698
2699set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2700 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2701
2702set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2703 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2704
2705set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2706 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2707
2708Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2709commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2710
2711
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002712R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2713
2714The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2715can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2716 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2717
2718You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2719 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2720
2721enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2722braces: >
2723 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2724
2725and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2726 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2727
2728
2729R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2730
2731To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2732 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2733
2734To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2735 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2736
2737To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2738 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2739
2740By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2741language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2742you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2743`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2744you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2745 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2746
2747
2748R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2749
2750To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2751 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2752
2753
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002754READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002755
2756The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002757few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002758items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2759command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2760 let readline_has_bash = 1
2761
2762This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2763later, and part earlier) adds.
2764
2765
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002766REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2767
2768Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2769language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2770the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2771
2772
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002773RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2774
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002775Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2776select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2777syntax list.
2778
2779To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002780 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002781
2782To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2783`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2784 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002785 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2786 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002787 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002788 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002789
2790To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2791 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2792
2793To enable folding of sections: >
2794 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2795
2796Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2797
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002798
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002799REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002800
2801If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2802when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2803to a larger number: >
2804 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2805This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2806displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2807number is that redrawing can become slow.
2808
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002809Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2810comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2811your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2812>
2813 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2814
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002815
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002816RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002817
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002818 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2819 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2820 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2821 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2822 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2823
2824 *ruby_operators*
2825 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2826
2827Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2828
2829 :let ruby_operators = 1
2830<
2831 *ruby_space_errors*
2832 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2833
2834Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2835
2836 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2837<
2838This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2839as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2840"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2841spaces respectively.
2842
2843 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2844 Ruby: Folding ~
2845
2846Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2847
2848 :let ruby_fold = 1
2849<
2850This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2851buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2852filetypes.
2853
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002854Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2855"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2856
2857You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2858
2859 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2860<
2861The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2862
2863 keyword meaning ~
2864 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2865 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2866 NONE Nothing
2867 if "if" or "unless" block
2868 def "def" block
2869 class "class" block
2870 module "module" block
2871 do "do" block
2872 begin "begin" block
2873 case "case" block
2874 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2875 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2876 [ Array literal
2877 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2878 / Regexp
2879 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2880 : Symbol
2881 # Multiline comment
2882 << Here documents
2883 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2884
2885 *ruby_no_expensive*
2886 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002887
2888By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002889of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002890experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2891you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002892
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002893 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002894<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002895In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2896
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002897 *ruby_minlines*
2898
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002899If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2900scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2901the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002902
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002903 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002904<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002905Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2906largest class or module.
2907
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002908 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2909 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002910
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002911Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2912"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002913
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002914 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002915<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002916
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002917SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002918
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002919By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002920
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002921scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2922Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002923
2924
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002925SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002926
2927The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2928of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2929
2930The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2931case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002932used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002933highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2934 :let sdl_2000=1
2935
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002936This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002937keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2938 :let SDL_no_96=1
2939
2940
2941The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2942satisfied with it for my own projects.
2943
2944
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002945SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002946
2947To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2948highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2949
2950 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2951
2952in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2953inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2954by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2955also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2956you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2957
2958Bugs:
2959
2960 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2961 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2962 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2963 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2964 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2965 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2966
2967
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002968SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002969
2970The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2971
2972The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2973This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2974closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2975defined for you)
2976
2977Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
2978names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
2979
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002980Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002981names are colored differently than unknown ones.
2982
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002983Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002984are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
2985text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
2986<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
2987
2988If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
2989following syntax groups:
2990
2991 - sgmlBold
2992 - sgmlBoldItalic
2993 - sgmlUnderline
2994 - sgmlItalic
2995 - sgmlLink for links
2996
2997To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
2998following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
2999are read during initialization) >
3000 let sgml_my_rendering=1
3001
3002You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3003vimrc file: >
3004 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3005
3006(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3007
3008
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003009 *ft-posix-synax* *ft-dash-syntax*
3010SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003011
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003012This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3013shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003014
3015Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003016various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003017
3018 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3019 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3020<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003021See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3022cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3023/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3024that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3025shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3026symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003027
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003028One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003029variables in your <.vimrc>:
3030
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003031 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003032 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01003033< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003034 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003035< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003036 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003037< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003038 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003039
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003040< (dash users should use posix)
3041
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003042If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3043default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003044the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3045statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003046sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003047
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003048The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3049
3050 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3051 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3052 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3053 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003054>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003055then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003056syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3057to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003058
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003059 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3060
3061If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3062when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003063to a larger number. Example: >
3064
3065 let sh_minlines = 500
3066
3067This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3068displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3069number is that redrawing can become slow.
3070
3071If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3072reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3073
3074 let sh_maxlines = 100
3075<
3076The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3077speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3078
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003079syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3080extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3081for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3082the following line in your .vimrc: >
3083
3084 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3085<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003086
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003087 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3088 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003089
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003090You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3091Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3092file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3093
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003094 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003095 " ==============
3096 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3097 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3098 unlet b:current_syntax
3099 endif
3100 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3101 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3102 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3103 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3104 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3105<
3106This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3107 awk '...awk code here...'
3108be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3109extended to other languages.
3110
3111
3112SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3113(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003114
3115The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3116
3117- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3118 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3119 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3120
3121- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3122 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003123 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003124 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3125 them in the syntax file.
3126
3127- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3128 highlighting of # style comments.
3129
3130 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3131 number of #s.
3132
3133 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003134 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003135
3136 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3137 more than one #.
3138
3139Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003140PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003141fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3142the syntax file.
3143
3144
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003145SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3146 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003147 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003148
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003149While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3150custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3151SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003152
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003153Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3154scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3155supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3156buffer by buffer basis.
3157
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003158For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003159
3160
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003161TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003162
3163This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3164for how the filetype is detected.
3165
3166Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003167is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003168this line to your .vimrc: >
3169
3170 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3171
3172If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3173when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3174to a larger number: >
3175
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003176 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003177
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003178This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3179displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3180synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3181tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3182redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003183
3184
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003185TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003186
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003187 Tex Contents~
3188 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3189 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3190 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3191 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3192 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3193 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3194 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3195 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3196 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3197 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3198 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3199 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3200 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003201 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003202
3203 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003204 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003205
3206As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3207sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3208 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3209in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3210modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3211 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003212If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003213 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003214<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003215 *g:tex_nospell*
3216 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3217
3218If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3219 let g:tex_nospell=1
3220into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3221comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3222
3223 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003224 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003225
3226Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3227prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3228this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3229 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003230If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3231see |g:tex_nospell|.
3232
3233 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003234 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003235
3236Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3237one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3238want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3239 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003240<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003241 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003242 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003243
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003244The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3245highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3246texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3247terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3248as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003249special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3250 %stopzone
3251which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3252texMathZone.
3253
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003254 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003255 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003256
3257If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3258 :syn sync maxlines=200
3259 :syn sync minlines=50
3260(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003261increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003262if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3263
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003264Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3265|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3266
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003267 *g:tex_fast*
3268
3269Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3270
3271 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3272
3273in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3274highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3275synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3276price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3277folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3278
3279You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3280selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3281
3282 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3283 c : allow texComment syntax
3284 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3285 M : allow texMath syntax
3286 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3287 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3288 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3289 S : allow texStyle syntax
3290 v : allow verbatim syntax
3291 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3292<
3293As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3294but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003295(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003296
3297 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003298 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003299
3300LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3301of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3302package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3303it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3304techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003305by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3306which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3307http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003308
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003309I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3310
3311 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3312<
3313The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3314
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003315 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003316 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003317
3318The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3319although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3320errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3321you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003322 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003323and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003324
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003325 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003326 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003327
3328If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3329code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003330 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3331You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3332(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3333As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3334 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3335You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3336and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3337The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3338has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003339
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003340 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003341 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003342
3343One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3344commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3345following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3346such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3347
3348 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3349 :set ft=tex
3350
3351Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3352always accept such use of @.
3353
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003354 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003355 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003356
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003357If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3358number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3359including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3360superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3361superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3362In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3363
3364One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3365with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003366
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003367 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003368 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3369
3370You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003371<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3372for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003373
3374 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003375 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003376 d = delimiters
3377 m = math symbols
3378 g = Greek
3379 s = superscripts/subscripts
3380<
3381By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3382substitution will not be made.
3383
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003384 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3385 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3386
3387Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3388keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3389syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3390
3391 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3392 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3393 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003394 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003395 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3396 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3397 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003398 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003399
3400 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3401 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3402
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003403 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3404 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3405
3406 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3407
3408 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3409 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3410
3411 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3412 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3413 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3414 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3415
3416 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3417 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3418<
3419 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3420 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3421 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3422< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3423 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3424
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003425
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003426TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003427
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003428There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3429
3430For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3431set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3432
3433 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3434<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003435VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3436 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003437There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003438updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3439g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3440improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003441
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003442 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3443 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3444<
3445 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3446 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003447
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003448 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3449The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3450embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003451
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003452 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3453 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003454 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3455 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3456 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3457 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3458 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003459<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003460By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3461itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3462of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3463and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003464 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003465
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003466Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003467
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003468 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3469 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3470 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003471 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003472 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3473 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3474 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3475 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3476 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003477<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003478 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003479Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3480is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003481highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003482
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003483 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3484<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003485
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003486
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003487XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003488
3489The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3490variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3491You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3492xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3493your .vimrc. Example: >
3494 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3495When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3496
3497Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3498"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3499highlighted.
3500
3501
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003502XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003503
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003504Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003505setting a global variable: >
3506
3507 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3508<
3509 *xml-folding*
3510The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003511start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003512
3513 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3514 :set foldmethod=syntax
3515
3516Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3517especially for large files.
3518
3519
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003520X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003521
3522xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3523XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3524you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3525
3526To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3527somewhere else with "P".
3528
3529Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3530 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003531 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003532 : echo c
3533 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3534 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3535 :endfunction
3536 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3537 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3538This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3539It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3540must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3541
3542It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3543 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3544
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003545
3546YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3547
3548 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003549A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3550non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3551plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3552and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3553integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003554will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3555
3556Schema Description ~
3557failsafe No additional highlighting.
3558json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3559core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003560pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3561 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3562 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003563 schema.
3564
3565Default schema is `core`.
3566
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003567Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3568only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003569difference defined in the syntax file.
3570
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003571
3572ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3573
3574The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3575
3576 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3577
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003578==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010035796. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003580
3581Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3582
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035831. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003584 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3585 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3586 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3587 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3588 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3589
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035902. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003591 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3592
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035933. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003594 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3595 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3596 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3597
3598Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3599you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3600to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3601and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3602"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3603one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3604This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3605each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3606for a lot of groups.
3607
3608Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3609group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3610for the syntax group with the same name.
3611
3612In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3613defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3614using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3615match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3616keyword with ignoring case.
3617
3618
3619PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3620
3621When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3622
36231. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3624 defined last has priority.
36252. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36263. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3627 start in later positions.
3628
3629
3630DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3631
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003632:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003633 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3634 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3635 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3636 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3637
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003638:sy[ntax] case
3639 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003640
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003641
3642DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel*
3643
3644:sy[ntax] foldlevel [start | minimum]
3645 This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using
3646 foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|):
3647
3648 start: Use level of item containing start of line.
3649 minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line.
3650
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003651 The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003652 for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a
3653 higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items
3654 may close and open horizontally within a line.
3655
3656:sy[ntax] foldlevel
3657 Show either "syntax foldlevel start" or "syntax foldlevel minimum".
3658
3659 {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
3660
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003661SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3662
3663:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3664 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3665 in a syntax item:
3666
3667 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3668 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3669 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3670
3671 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3672 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3673 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3674
3675 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3676
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003677:sy[ntax] spell
3678 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3679 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3680
3681
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003682SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3683
3684:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3685 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3686 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3687
3688 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3689 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003690 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003691
3692 Example: >
3693 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3694<
3695 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3696 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3697 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3698
3699 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3700
3701 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003702 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003703 match.
3704
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003705 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3706 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003707 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003708
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003709DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3710
3711:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3712
3713 This defines a number of keywords.
3714
3715 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3716 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3717 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3718
3719 Example: >
3720 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3721<
3722 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3723 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3724 These examples do exactly the same: >
3725 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3726 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3727 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003728< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003729 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3730 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3731 variations at once: >
3732 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3733<
3734 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3735 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3736 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3737 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3738 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003739 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003740
3741 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3742 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3743 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3744
3745 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3746 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3747 instead.
3748
3749 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3750
3751 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3752 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3753 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003754 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003755 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3756 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3757< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3758 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3759 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3760
3761
3762DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3763
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003764:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3765 [excludenl]
3766 [keepend]
3767 {pattern}
3768 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003769
3770 This defines one match.
3771
3772 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3773 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3774 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3775 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3776 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003777 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3778 match with the end pattern. See
3779 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003780 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3781 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3782 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3783 line, which makes the match depend on where
3784 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3785 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3786
3787 Example (match a character constant): >
3788 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3789<
3790
3791DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3792 *E398* *E399*
3793:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3794 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3795 [keepend]
3796 [extend]
3797 [excludenl]
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003798 start={start-pattern} ..
3799 [skip={skip-pattern}]
3800 end={end-pattern} ..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003801 [{options}]
3802
3803 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3804
3805 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3806 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3807 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3808 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3809 for the text in between the matched start and
3810 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3811 a different group for the start or end match.
3812 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3813 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3814 match with the end pattern. See
3815 |:syn-keepend|.
3816 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003817 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003818 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3819 extend a containing match or item. Only
3820 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3821 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003822 start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003823 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003824 skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003825 the region where not to look for the end
3826 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003827 end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003828 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3829
3830 Example: >
3831 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3832<
3833 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3834 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3835 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3836 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3837 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3838 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3839
3840 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3841 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3842 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3843 the end patterns.
3844
3845 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3846 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3847 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3848
3849 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3850 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3851 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3852 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3853
3854 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3855 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3856 work: >
3857 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3858 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3859< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3860 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3861 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3862 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3863 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3864< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3865 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3866
3867 *:syn-keepend*
3868 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3869 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3870 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3871 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3872 { starts outer "{}" region
3873 { starts contained "{}" region
3874 } ends contained "{}" region
3875 } ends outer "{} region
3876 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3877 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3878 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3879 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3880 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3881 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3882 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3883< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3884 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3885
3886 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3887 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3888 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3889 contained matches.
3890 *:syn-extend*
3891 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3892 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3893 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3894 extended.
3895 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3896 others don't. Example: >
3897
3898 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3899 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3900 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3901
3902< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3903 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3904 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3905
3906 Another example: >
3907 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3908< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3909 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3910 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3911 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3912 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3913
3914 *:syn-excludenl*
3915 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3916 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3917 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3918 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3919 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3920 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3921 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3922 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3923 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3924 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3925 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3926 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3927 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3928
3929 *:syn-matchgroup*
3930 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3931 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3932 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3933< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3934 between with the "String" group.
3935 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3936 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3937 using a matchgroup.
3938
3939 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3940 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3941 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3942 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3943 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3944
3945 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3946 different colors: >
3947 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3948 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3949 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3950 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3951 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3952 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003953<
3954 *E849*
3955The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003956
3957==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010039587. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003959
3960The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
3961The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
3962and may be mixed with patterns.
3963
3964Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
3965can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02003966 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003967 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
3968:syntax keyword - - - - - -
3969:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
3970:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003971
3972These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003973 conceal
3974 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003975 contained
3976 containedin
3977 nextgroup
3978 transparent
3979 skipwhite
3980 skipnl
3981 skipempty
3982
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003983conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
3984
3985When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02003986Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02003987'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
3988concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
3989edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02003990Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003991
3992concealends *:syn-concealends*
3993
3994When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
3995the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
3996Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
3997'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
3998in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
3999
4000cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004001 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004002The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
4003when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
4004argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004005character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
4006a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004007 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02004008See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004009
4010contained *:syn-contained*
4011
4012When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
4013the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
4014another match. Example: >
4015 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
4016 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
4017
4018
4019display *:syn-display*
4020
4021If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4022detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4023by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4024to be displayed.
4025
4026Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4027conditions:
4028- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4029 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4030 line.
4031- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4032 make it continue on the next line.
4033- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4034 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4035 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4036- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4037 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4038 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4039 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4040
4041Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4042- match with a number
4043- match with a label
4044
4045
4046transparent *:syn-transparent*
4047
4048If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4049itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4050is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4051only to skip over a part of the text.
4052
4053The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4054unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4055avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4056highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4057 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4058 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4059 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4060 :hi link myString String
4061 :hi link myWord Comment
4062Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4063match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4064argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4065it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4066out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
4067"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This
4068happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4069position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4070
4071When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4072items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4073see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4074through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4075
4076 look from here
4077
4078 | | | | | |
4079 V V V V V V
4080
4081 xxxx yyy more contained items
4082 .................... contained item (transparent)
4083 ============================= first item
4084
4085The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4086transparent group.
4087
4088What you see is:
4089
4090 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4091
4092Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4093
4094
4095oneline *:syn-oneline*
4096
4097The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4098boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4099region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4100the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4101continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4102line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4103
4104When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4105pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4106end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4107means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4108be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4109line break.
4110
4111
4112fold *:syn-fold*
4113
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004114The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004115Example: >
4116 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4117 :syn sync fromstart
4118 :set foldmethod=syntax
4119This will make each {} block form one fold.
4120
4121The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4122ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4123The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02004124See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed
4125from its syntax items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004126{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4127
4128
4129 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004130contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004131
4132The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4133groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4134containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4135regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4136this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4137here.
4138
4139contains=ALL
4140 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4141 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4142
4143contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4144 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4145 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4146 are listed. Example: >
4147 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4148
4149contains=TOP
4150 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4151 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4152 argument.
4153contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4154 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4155
4156contains=CONTAINED
4157 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4158 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4159 argument.
4160contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4161 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4162 listed.
4163
4164
4165The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4166that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4167The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4168 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4169The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4170that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4171command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4172syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4173the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4174group names.
4175
4176The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4177region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4178|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4179region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4180area that is highlighted
4181
4182
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004183containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004184
4185The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4186item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4187containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4188
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004189The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004190
4191This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4192be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4193of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4194the C syntax: >
4195 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4196Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4197level.
4198
4199Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4200appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4201keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4202work.
4203
4204
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004205nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004206
4207The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4208separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4209
4210If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4211tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4212a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4213will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4214current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4215other groups. Example: >
4216 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4217 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4218 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4219
4220This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4221"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4222highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4223
4224 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4225 fff bbb fff bbb
4226
4227Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4228when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4229highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4230would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4231
4232
4233skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4234skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4235skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4236
4237These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4238used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004239 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004240 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4241 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4242
4243When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4244next group that matches the white space.
4245
4246When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4247line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4248line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4249the current item in the same line.
4250
4251When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4252groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4253for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4254space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4255
4256Example: >
4257 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4258 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4259 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4260Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4261match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4262precedence.
4263Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4264"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4265example).
4266
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004267IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4268
4269:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4270 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4271 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4272 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4273 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4274 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4275 given explicitly.
4276
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004277:sy[ntax] conceal
4278 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4279
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004280==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010042818. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004282
4283In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4284characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4285use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4286use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4287 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4288 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4289
4290See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004291always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004292value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4293not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4294independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4295
4296Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4297This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4298
4299 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4300The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4301change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4302match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4303are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4304pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4305
4306The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4307The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4308
4309ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4310me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4311hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4312he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4313rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4314re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4315lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4316
4317The {offset} can be:
4318
4319s start of the matched pattern
4320s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4321s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4322e end of the matched pattern
4323e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4324e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004325{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004326
4327Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4328
4329Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4330meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4331
4332 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4333match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4334region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4335region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4336region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4337
4338Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4339 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4340<
4341 some "string" text
4342 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4343
4344Notes:
4345- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4346 offset(s).
4347- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4348- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4349 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004350- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02004351 This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004352 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004353- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4354 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4355 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4356
4357Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4358 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4359<
4360 /* this is a comment */
4361 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4362
4363A more complicated Example: >
4364 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4365<
4366 abcfoostringbarabc
4367 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004368 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004369
4370Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4371
4372Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4373with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4374in the pattern.
4375
4376The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4377be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4378cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4379characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4380used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4381specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4382
4383 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4384 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4385 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4386<
4387 ___zzzz ___wwww
4388 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4389 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4390 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4391
4392The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4393unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4394
4395
4396Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4397
4398The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4399expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4400
4401When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4402allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004403following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4404the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004405
4406The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4407continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4408matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4409halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4410previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4411is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4412 x x a
4413 b x x
4414Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4415after the "\n".
4416
4417
4418External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4419
4420These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4421
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004422 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004423 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4424 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4425 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004426
4427 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4428 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4429 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4430 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4431
4432Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4433sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4434shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4435items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4436referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4437example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4438 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4439
4440As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4441it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004442changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004443first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4444also be used in skip patterns: >
4445 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4446
4447Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4448indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4449to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4450Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4451within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4452sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4453the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4454
4455Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4456cannot be referred to.
4457
4458==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010044599. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004460
4461:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4462 [add={group-name}..]
4463 [remove={group-name}..]
4464
4465This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4466single name.
4467
4468 contains={group-name}..
4469 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4470 add={group-name}..
4471 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4472 remove={group-name}..
4473 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4474
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004475A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4476nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4477this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004478
4479Example: >
4480 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4481 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4482
4483As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4484retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4485to speak: >
4486 :syntax keyword A aaa
4487 :syntax keyword B bbb
4488 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4489 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4490 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4491
4492This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4493 :syntax keyword A aaa
4494 :syntax keyword B bbb
4495 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4496 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4497 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4498 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4499 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004500<
4501 *E848*
4502The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004503
4504==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100450510. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004506
4507It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4508a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4509two different ways:
4510
4511 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4512 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4513 the |:runtime| command: >
4514
4515 " In cpp.vim:
4516 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4517 :unlet b:current_syntax
4518
4519< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4520 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4521 ":syntax include" command:
4522
4523:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4524
4525 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4526 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4527 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4528 that list. >
4529
4530 " In perl.vim:
4531 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4532 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4533<
4534 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4535 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4536 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4537 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4538 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +01004539 with their own version, without replacing the file that does the
4540 ":syn include".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004541
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004542 *E847*
4543The maximum number of includes is 999.
4544
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004545==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100454611. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004547
4548Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4549make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4550redrawing starts.
4551
4552:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4553
4554There are four ways to synchronize:
45551. Always parse from the start of the file.
4556 |:syn-sync-first|
45572. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4558 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4559 |:syn-sync-second|
45603. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4561 |:syn-sync-third|
45624. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4563 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4564
4565 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4566For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4567limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4568
4569If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4570that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4571lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4572
4573If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4574for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4575adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4576slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004577 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004578<
4579 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4580When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4581cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4582start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4583the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4584break use this: >
4585 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4586The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4587change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4588value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4589
4590
4591First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4592>
4593 :syntax sync fromstart
4594
4595The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4596accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4597so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004598when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004599case: to the end of the file).
4600
4601Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4602
4603
4604Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4605
4606For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4607Example: >
4608 :syntax sync ccomment
4609
4610When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4611comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4612used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4613An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4614 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4615This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4616used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4617region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4618
4619The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4620lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4621lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4622lines, but it hard to sync on).
4623
4624Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4625that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4626is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4627chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4628is hardly ever noticed.
4629
4630
4631Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4632
4633For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4634Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4635means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4636Example: >
4637 :syntax sync minlines=50
4638
4639"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4640
4641
4642Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4643
4644The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4645sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4646region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4647starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4648the search continues backwards in the file.
4649
4650This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4651matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4652- Keywords cannot be used.
4653- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4654 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4655- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4656 forwards.
4657- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4658 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4659 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
4660 consecutive that contain the continuation pattern.
4661- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4662 group of continued lines).
4663- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4664 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4665 line (or group of continued lines).
4666- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4667 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4668 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4669 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4670
4671There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
46721. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4673 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4674 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4675 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
46762. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4677 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4678 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4679 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4680Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4681
4682Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4683avoid finding unwanted matches.
4684
4685[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4686search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4687highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4688faster.]
4689
4690 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4691 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4692
4693 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4694 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4695 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4696 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4697 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4698
4699 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4700 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4701
4702 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4703 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4704 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4705 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4706 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4707 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4708 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4709 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4710 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4711 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4712
4713 :syntax sync match ..
4714 :syntax sync region ..
4715
4716 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4717 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4718
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004719 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004720 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4721
4722 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4723 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4724 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4725
4726If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4727searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4728few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4729 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4730
4731You can clear all sync settings with: >
4732 :syntax sync clear
4733
4734You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4735 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4736
4737==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100473812. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004739
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004740This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004741
4742 :sy[ntax] [list]
4743
4744To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4745
4746 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4747
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004748To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004749
4750 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4751
4752See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4753
4754Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4755is mostly used, because it looks better.
4756
4757==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100475813. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004759
4760There are three types of highlight groups:
4761- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4762 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4763 linked to a group of the second type.
4764- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4765- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4766 *hitest.vim*
4767You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4768 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4769This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4770in their own color.
4771
4772 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004773:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4774 This is basically the same as >
4775 :echo g:colors_name
4776< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4777 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4778 feature it will output "unknown".
4779
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004780:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004781 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004782 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004783 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4784 "start" and then under "opt".
4785
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004786 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004787 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004788
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004789 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004790 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004791 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004792 runtime colors/evening.vim
4793 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4794
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004795< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4796 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4797 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004798 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004799 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004800 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004801
4802:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4803 attributes set.
4804
4805:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4806 List one highlight group.
4807
4808:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4809 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4810 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4811 default colors to use.
4812
4813:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4814:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4815 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4816 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4817
4818:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4819 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4820 an existing group.
4821 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4822 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4823 argument.
4824
4825Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4826default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4827highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4828values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4829the default value.
4830
4831A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4832a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4833
4834 :hi Comment gui=bold
4835
4836Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4837specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4838result is like this single command has been used: >
4839 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4840<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004841 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004842When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4843also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4844 :verbose hi Comment
4845< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004846 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004847
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004848When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4849mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004850
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004851 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4852There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4853term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004854cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004855 termcap entry)
4856gui the GUI
4857
4858For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4859the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4860
48611. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4862
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004863 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4864 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004865 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004866term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4867 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4868 following items (in any order):
4869 bold
4870 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004871 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004872 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004873 reverse
4874 inverse same as reverse
4875 italic
4876 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004877 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004878 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4879
4880 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4881 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004882 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004883 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
Bram Moolenaaracc22402020-06-07 21:07:18 +02004884 are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set
4885 with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these
4886 termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: >
4887 let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m"
4888 let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m"
4889
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004890
4891start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4892stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4893 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4894 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4895
4896 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4897 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4898 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4899 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4900 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4901 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4902 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4903
4904 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4905
4906 1. A string with escape sequences.
4907 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4908 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4909 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4910 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4911
4912 2. A list of terminal codes.
4913 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4914 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4915 White space is not allowed. Example:
4916 start=t_C1,t_BL
4917 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4918
4919
49202. highlight arguments for color terminals
4921
4922cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4923 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4924 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4925 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4926 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004927 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4928 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4929 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004930
4931ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4932ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02004933ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul*
4934 These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and
4935 underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal.
4936
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004937 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4938 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4939 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4940 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4941 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4942 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4943
4944 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4945 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4946 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4947 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4948 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
4949
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004950 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
4951 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
4952 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004953 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
4954 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
4955
4956 *cterm-colors*
4957 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
4958 0 0 Black
4959 1 4 DarkBlue
4960 2 2 DarkGreen
4961 3 6 DarkCyan
4962 4 1 DarkRed
4963 5 5 DarkMagenta
4964 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
4965 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
4966 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
4967 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
4968 10 2* Green, LightGreen
4969 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
4970 12 1* Red, LightRed
4971 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
4972 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
4973 15 7* White
4974
4975 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
4976 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
4977 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
4978 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
4979 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
4980 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
4981 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
4982 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
4983 a number instead of a color name.
4984
4985 The case of the color names is ignored.
4986 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00004987 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004988 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
4989
4990 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
4991 colors!
4992
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01004993 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
4994
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004995 *:hi-normal-cterm*
4996 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
4997 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
4998 Example: >
4999 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
5000< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02005001 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
5002 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
5003 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
5004 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
5005 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02005006 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005007 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01005008 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005009
5010 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
5011 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
5012 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
5013 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005014 *E419* *E420* *E453*
5015 When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors,
5016 "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after
5017 setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows
5018 console. Example, for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005019 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
5020< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
Bram Moolenaar75e15672020-06-28 13:10:22 +02005021 command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005022 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
5023
5024
50253. highlight arguments for the GUI
5026
5027gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
5028 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
5029 See |attr-list| for a description.
5030 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
5031 have the same effect.
5032 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5033
5034font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5035 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5036 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5037 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5038<
5039 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5040 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5041 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5042 used).
5043 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5044 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5045 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5046 changed.
5047 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5048 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5049 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005050 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5051 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5052 Example: >
5053 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005054
5055guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5056guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005057guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5058 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005059 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5060 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005061 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005062 NONE no color (transparent)
5063 bg use normal background color
5064 background use normal background color
5065 fg use normal foreground color
5066 foreground use normal foreground color
5067 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5068 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5069 Example: >
5070 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5071<
5072 *gui-colors*
5073 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5074 Red LightRed DarkRed
5075 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5076 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5077 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5078 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5079 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5080 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5081 Black White
5082 Orange Purple Violet
5083
5084 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5085 |win32-colors|.
5086
5087 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5088 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5089 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005090 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005091 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005092 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5093 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5094<
5095 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5096These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5097'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5098of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5099command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005100 *hl-ColorColumn*
5101ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005102 *hl-Conceal*
5103Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5104 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005105 *hl-Cursor*
5106Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005107lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5108 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005109 *hl-CursorIM*
5110CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005111 *hl-CursorColumn*
5112CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5113 set
5114 *hl-CursorLine*
5115CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5116 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005117 *hl-Directory*
5118Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5119 *hl-DiffAdd*
5120DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5121 *hl-DiffChange*
5122DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5123 *hl-DiffDelete*
5124DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5125 *hl-DiffText*
5126DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005127 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005128EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5129 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005130 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5131ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5132 *hl-VertSplit*
5133VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5134 *hl-Folded*
5135Folded line used for closed folds
5136 *hl-FoldColumn*
5137FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5138 *hl-SignColumn*
5139SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5140 *hl-IncSearch*
5141IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5142 ":s///c"
5143 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005144LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005145 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005146 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5147LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5148 option is set, above the cursor line.
5149 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5150LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5151 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005152 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005153CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5154 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005155 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005156 *hl-MatchParen*
5157MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5158 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5159
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005160 *hl-ModeMsg*
5161ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5162 *hl-MoreMsg*
5163MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5164 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005165NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5166 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5167 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5168 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005169 *hl-Normal*
5170Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005171 *hl-Pmenu*
5172Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5173 *hl-PmenuSel*
5174PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5175 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5176PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5177 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5178PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005179 *hl-Question*
5180Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005181 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5182QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005183 *hl-Search*
5184Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005185 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005186 *hl-SpecialKey*
5187SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5188 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5189 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5190 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005191 *hl-SpellBad*
5192SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5193 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005194 *hl-SpellCap*
5195SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5196 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005197 *hl-SpellLocal*
5198SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5199 used in another region. |spell|
5200 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5201 *hl-SpellRare*
5202SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5203 hardly ever used. |spell|
5204 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005205 *hl-StatusLine*
5206StatusLine status line of current window
5207 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5208StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5209 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5210 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005211 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5212StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5213 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5214StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5215 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005216 *hl-TabLine*
5217TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5218 *hl-TabLineFill*
5219TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5220 *hl-TabLineSel*
5221TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005222 *hl-Terminal*
5223Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005224 *hl-Title*
5225Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5226 *hl-Visual*
5227Visual Visual mode selection
5228 *hl-VisualNOS*
5229VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5230 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5231 *hl-WarningMsg*
5232WarningMsg warning messages
5233 *hl-WildMenu*
5234WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5235
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005236 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005237The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005238statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005239
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005240For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005241scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5242Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5243and guifg.
5244
5245 *hl-Menu*
5246Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5247 Also used for the toolbar.
5248 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5249
5250 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5251 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5252 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5253 set.
5254
5255 *hl-Scrollbar*
5256Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5257 scrollbars.
5258 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5259
5260 *hl-Tooltip*
5261Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5262 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5263
5264 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5265 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5266 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5267 set.
5268
5269==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100527014. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005271
5272When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5273can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5274group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5275
5276To set a link:
5277
5278 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5279
5280To remove a link:
5281
5282 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5283
5284Notes: *E414*
5285- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5286 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5287- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5288 removed.
5289- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5290 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5291 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5292 links for groups that already have settings.
5293
5294 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5295The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5296group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5297will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5298
5299Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5300specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5301 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5302If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5303 :highlight link cComment Question
5304Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5305overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5306
5307==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100530815. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005309
5310If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5311command: >
5312 :syntax clear
5313
5314This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5315or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5316in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5317load the syntax file.
5318The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5319loaded after this command.
5320
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005321To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5322 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5323This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5324
5325To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5326 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5327This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5328
5329 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005330If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5331the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5332 :syntax off
5333
5334What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5335 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5336See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5337$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5338
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005339 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5340If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5341defaults back: >
5342
5343 :syntax reset
5344
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005345It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5346affects the highlighting.
5347
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005348This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5349
5350Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5351back to their Vim default.
5352Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5353scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5354
5355What this actually does is: >
5356
5357 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5358 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5359
5360Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5361
5362 *syncolor*
5363If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5364script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5365'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5366the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5367reset" command.
5368
5369For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5370
5371 if &background == "light"
5372 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5373 else
5374 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5375 endif
5376
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005377 *E679*
5378Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5379'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5380endless loop.
5381
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005382Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5383your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5384depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5385
5386 *syntax_cmd*
5387The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5388syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5389 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5390 links are kept
5391 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5392 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5393 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5394 the colors.
5395 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5396 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5397 them.
5398
5399==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100540016. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005401
5402If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5403mappings.
5404
5405 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5406 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5407>
5408 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5409 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5410
5411WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5412memory Vim will consume.
5413
5414Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5415must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5416
5417Put these lines in your Makefile:
5418
5419# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5420types: types.vim
5421types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005422 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005423 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5424 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5425
5426And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5427
5428 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5429 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5430 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5431 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5432 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5433
5434==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100543517. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005436
5437Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5438possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5439private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5440with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5441highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5442italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5443
5444To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5445windows on the buffer: >
5446 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005447< *w:current_syntax*
5448This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5449"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5450restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5451"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5452"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005453Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005454
5455Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005456on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005457syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005458same buffer.
5459
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005460A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5461is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5462When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005463
5464==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100546518. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005466
5467Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5468default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5469 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5470 : if has("terminfo")
5471 : set t_Co=8
5472 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5473 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5474 : else
5475 : set t_Co=8
5476 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5477 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5478 : endif
5479 :endif
5480< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5481
5482You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5483e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5484
5485Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5486be wrong.
5487 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5488The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5489But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5490 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5491 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5492<
5493 *colortest.vim*
5494To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005495To use it, execute this command: >
5496 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005497
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005498Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005499output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5500at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5501colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5502
5503 *xfree-xterm*
5504To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005505included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005506at: >
5507 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5508Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5509termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5510supports. >
5511 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5512If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5513(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5514
5515This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5516 :if has("terminfo")
5517 : set t_Co=16
5518 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5519 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5520 :else
5521 : set t_Co=16
5522 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5523 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5524 :endif
5525< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5526
5527Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5528translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5529Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5530
5531For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5532
5533 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5534 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5535
5536Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5537and try if that works.
5538
5539You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5540 XTerm*color0: #000000
5541 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5542 XTerm*color2: #008000
5543 XTerm*color3: #808000
5544 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5545 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5546 XTerm*color6: #008080
5547 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5548 XTerm*color8: #808080
5549 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5550 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5551 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5552 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5553 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5554 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5555 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5556 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5557
5558[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5559cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005560newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005561
5562To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5563Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5564 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5565<
5566 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5567To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5568Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5569these resources:
5570 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5571 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5572 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5573 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5574
5575 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005576These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005577foreground colors: >
5578 :if has("terminfo")
5579 : set t_Co=8
5580 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5581 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5582 :else
5583 : set t_Co=8
5584 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5585 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5586 :endif
5587< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5588
5589 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5590These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5591emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5592bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5593 :set t_Co=16
5594 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5595 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5596<
5597 *TTpro-telnet*
5598These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5599open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5600 set t_Co=16
5601 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5602 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5603Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5604that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5605(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5606
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005607
5608==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100560919. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005610
5611This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5612
5613If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5614faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5615as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5616
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005617Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5618You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5619
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005620To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5621sequence: >
5622 :syntime on
5623 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5624 :syntime report
5625
5626This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5627it took to match them against the text.
5628
5629:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5630 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5631 matching.
5632
5633:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5634
5635:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5636
5637:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5638 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5639 the output.
5640
5641 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5642 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5643 matching this pattern.
5644 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5645 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5646 matched
5647 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5648 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5649 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5650 this is not unique.
5651 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5652
5653Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5654include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5655pattern does NOT match.
5656
5657When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5658all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5659literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5660
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005661"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005662 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005663"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005664
5665
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005666 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: